JP2016120215A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To give a technique capable of suppressing the problem of getting absorbed in a game by clarifying a time to stop the game.SOLUTION: A festival mode is a mode to which a shift is made in the case of corresponding to "2-round probability variable patterns 1a, 1b" or a "small winning". Thus, in the case that a shift is made to a festival mode, it is not recognized whether to be a normal state or a latent probability variable state only by looking at contents of a performance. Therefore, in the case of being the latent probability variable state, a latency designation lamp 38g of an integrated display board 89 being information of a main control device is turned on to display character information of "during a probability" in a data display device D with the end of a fourth loss variation after the shift to the festival mode as a trigger. This clarifies the time to stop the game to a player, and the problem of allowing the player to get absorbed in the game to continue the game without knowing whether an internal state is a normal state or a latent probability variable state is prevented from occurring.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 82

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays the symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbols in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that executes an effect suggesting whether or not the latent probability is being changed on a liquid crystal screen has been disclosed (for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, as this type of gaming machine, after the big hit, it is shifted to a mode where it is unknown whether or not the probability is changed, but as an external output, a signal indicating that the probability is changed is output, and the probability is changed on the liquid crystal screen at a predetermined timing. There is known a gaming machine that informs of this (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2009-11610 A JP 2009-273941 A

  The prior art described above is a technique for improving the continuity of the game by making it difficult to understand whether or not the state has shifted to a high probability state.

However, such gameability is good at the beginning, but if it is not known until now whether or not the state has shifted to the high probability state, the player's willingness to play decreases.
In addition, during the latent probability change, there may be an effect as if the player is transitioning to a high probability state on the LCD screen, but the information displayed on the LCD screen only suggests the latent probability changed state. It is only information to do.

  The reason for executing such a round suggestion effect is that all the information displayed on the liquid crystal screen is controlled by the effect control device, so the main control device does not display information indicating that the latent probability change state is displayed. This is because it is impossible to execute an effect indicating that the latent probability changing state is confirmed on the liquid crystal screen.

  For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, the liquid crystal screen is shifted to a mode that suggests a latent probability change state, etc., and the suggestion effect that the transition to the latent probability change state may have been performed is like this. In such a suggestive effect, it is difficult for a player to know when to stop, and there is a possibility that the problem of sinking may occur.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of clarifying when to stop and suppressing the occurrence of a sinking problem.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: A gaming machine according to the present solution is a gaming machine having, as internal states, a normal state to which a normal condition for a game is applied and an advantageous state to which an advantageous condition is applied compared to the normal state. A main control device for controlling the progress of the game by controlling at least the normal state and the advantageous state, and a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery in the main control device when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game; When the predetermined lottery is executed, the symbol display means for displaying the symbols in a manner corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the symbols are variably displayed as information of the main controller over a predetermined fluctuation time. When the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined number of times without obtaining a winning result in the predetermined lottery after the internal state has shifted to the advantageous state, information on the main controller A gaming machine and a favorable state display means for displaying said internal state is the advantageous state by.

A game by the gaming machine of the present invention proceeds, for example, along the flow shown below.
(1) A normal state (a low probability state where the winning probability of a special symbol is low probability) to which a normal condition is applied with respect to a game, and an advantageous state (a special symbol) to which a favorable condition is applied compared to this normal state In the internal state).

  Here, the advantageous state is a state to which conditions more advantageous than the normal state are applied, and thus basically corresponds to a “high probability state”. However, depending on the specifications of the game, the low-probability state may be maintained and the time-shortening state may be shifted to an advantageous state (low-probability time-shortening state). It may be advantageous.

(2) A main control device is provided for controlling (managing and setting) at least the normal state and the advantageous state of (1) above to control the progress of the game. The main control device is a device that is the center of the control operation, and controls the overall operation of the gaming machine.

(3) When a lottery opportunity occurs during the game (when a game ball enters the start winning opening), a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed by the main controller of (2) above.

(4) When the predetermined lottery of (3) above is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner over the predetermined fluctuation time as information of the main control device of (2), and then the above (3) The symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery.

(5) When the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times without obtaining the winning result in the predetermined lottery of (3) above after the internal state has shifted to the advantageous state (for example, the variation display of the deviation is displayed) When it is executed four times), it is displayed that the internal state is an advantageous state as information of the main control device of (2) above.

  As described above, according to the present solution, the fact that the internal state is in an advantageous state with a certain number of fluctuations is displayed as information of the main control device, so that an ambiguous high-probability state in the production control device (liquid crystal display) Unlike the suggestion effect of, it can be clearly communicated to the player that the internal state is in an advantageous state. This makes it possible to clarify when the player quits (material for determining whether the player will continue or end the game) and continue the game without knowing whether the internal state is the normal state or the advantageous state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem of intrusion.

  Moreover, in this solution, it is displayed as information of the main control device that the internal state is the advantageous state after a while after the transition to the advantageous state, not at the time of the transition to the advantageous state. For this reason, the main control is performed for a period of time when it is unknown whether the internal state has changed to the advantageous state for a while compared to the method of displaying the internal state of the advantageous state as the information of the main control device at the time of the advantageous state transition. It can be generated using information displayed by the device, and new gameplay can be exhibited.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution, in Solution 1, the winning symbol is not obtained in the predetermined lottery after the internal state shifts to the advantageous state, and the symbol is repeated a predetermined number of times. An gaming machine comprising: advantageous state information transmitting means for transmitting advantageous state information indicating that the internal state is the advantageous state to an external device when it is variably displayed.

  In the gaming machine of the present solution, when the internal state shifts to the advantageous state and the winning result is not obtained in a predetermined lottery and the symbol is displayed variably for a predetermined number of times (e.g. In the case of four consecutive times), for example, advantageous state information indicating that the internal state is advantageous is transmitted to an external device (data display device, hall computer, etc.) via an external terminal board.

  According to this solution, since it is possible to clearly grasp that the external device is in an advantageous state, it is possible to execute a display to the effect that the data display device or the hall computer is in an advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to clearly grasp the stop time even by an external device (by checking the data display device by the player), and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the sinking problem.

  Solving means 3: The gaming machine of the present solving means includes a special game executing means for executing a special game when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the symbol display means in the solving means 1 or 2. If the transition condition is satisfied, after the end of the special game, a transition is made to a high probability state in which a winning is obtained with a higher probability than a low probability state in which a winning is obtained with a predetermined probability at least with respect to the predetermined lottery. In addition, transition to the non-time shortened state without shifting to the time shortened state in which the lottery trigger can be generated at a higher frequency than the non-time shortened state in which the lottery trigger occurs at least at a predetermined frequency. And a high-probability non-time-shortened state transition means for shifting to a high-probability non-time-shortened state, wherein the advantageous state is the high-probability non-time-shortened state. It is a game machine.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) When a symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner, a special game (big hit game) is executed.
(2) When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when winning with a winning symbol for shifting to a high probability non-time shortened state), at least a predetermined probability with respect to a predetermined lottery after the completion of the special game of (1) above. In addition to shifting to a high-probability state where winning is obtained with a high probability compared to a low-probability state where winning is obtained, at least a lottery opportunity is often compared with a non-time-shortening state where a lottery opportunity occurs at a predetermined frequency By shifting to the non-time shortening state without shifting to the time shortening state where the occurrence is possible, the state is shifted to the high probability non-time shortening state. Note that after the special game is over, it may be immediately after the special game is over, or may be after several variations have passed since the special game was over.
(3) The advantageous state is the high probability non-time shortening state of (2) above.

  In this solution, since the advantageous state is a high probability non-time shortening state, the main control device can clearly communicate to the player that it is a so-called latent probability changing state. However, if the main control device displays immediately after the special game is over that the latent probability changing state is displayed, it will not be possible to give the player a sense of tension, so the fun will be halved. In this regard, in the above-described solution, the internal state is in the advantageous state when the winning state is not obtained in the predetermined lottery after the internal state has shifted to the advantageous state, and the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the initial stage, while maintaining the player's tension, the continuity of the game is ensured, and finally it is clearly displayed whether the internal state is in an advantageous state. Thus, the player can be given effective judgment material regarding whether or not the game can be continued.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present solution is a gaming machine according to any one of solutions 1 to 3, comprising an integrated display board on which at least the symbol display unit and the advantageous state display unit are mounted.

  According to this solving means, since the symbol display means and the advantageous state display means are mounted on one integrated display substrate, a plurality of display means can be compactly integrated, which can contribute to space saving. .

  In addition, as a player, since the symbol display means is a familiar display means, the advantage state display means is arranged in the vicinity thereof, thereby improving the visibility and ease of confirmation of the advantage state display means. Can be made.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine of the present solution, in any one of Solution 1 to 4, after executing a variable display effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol, stop display corresponding to the stop display of the symbol During the execution of the symbol effect execution means for executing the effect and the variable display effect or the stop display effect, a common effect of a common aspect is executed regardless of whether the internal state is the normal state or the advantageous state. A common effect execution means, and the advantageous state display means, during execution of the common effect, the winning state is not obtained in the predetermined lottery after the internal state shifts to the advantageous state. When the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times, it is displayed as information of the main control device that the internal state is the advantageous state, and the advantageous state information transmitting means If the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times without obtaining a winning result in the predetermined lottery after the internal state shifts to the advantageous state, the internal state is more advantageous than the external device. It is a gaming machine characterized by transmitting advantageous state information indicating a state.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) A variable display effect (scroll display of effect symbols) corresponding to the symbol variable display is executed, and a stop display effect (decision effect of effect symbols) corresponding to the symbol stop display is executed.
(2) During the execution of the variable display effect or the stop display effect of (1) above, a common effect of a common aspect is executed regardless of whether the internal state is the normal state or the advantageous state. Here, examples of common effects include mode effects after winning two rounds with no time reduction, after two wins without normal time, after normal winning, and after winning a small hit.

(3) Then, during execution of the common effect of (2), the fact that the internal state is in an advantageous state is displayed as information on the main control device.
(4) Also, when the internal state shifts to an advantageous state during the execution of the common effect of (2) above, the winning result is not obtained in a predetermined lottery, and the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times. Advantageous state information indicating that the internal state is the advantageous state is transmitted to the external device.

  As described above, according to the present solution, since the common effect of the common mode is executed regardless of whether the internal state is the normal state or the advantageous state, the player can play the internal state during the execution of the common effect. The game will be played without knowing. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to continue the game while maintaining a sense of expectation and tension.

  If the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times without obtaining a winning result in the predetermined lottery after the internal state shifts to the advantageous state during execution of the common effect, the internal state is in the advantageous state. Is displayed as information of the main controller.

  For this reason, even if a state in which it is difficult to understand whether or not it is advantageous in terms of performance continues, it may be clearly displayed that the internal state is advantageous as information of the main control device. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the sinking problem while clarifying when the person stops.

  In addition, even if it is difficult to determine whether or not it is advantageous in terms of performance, the external device may clearly indicate that the internal state is advantageous, so when the player quits This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem of sinking.

  Solving means 6: The gaming machine of the present solving means, in any one of the solving means 1 to 5, a winning type defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of winning types with respect to a winning result obtained by the predetermined lottery, When a winning result is obtained in a predetermined lottery, the winning type determining means for determining which of the plurality of winning types specified by the winning type specifying means corresponds to the winning type determining means. A gaming machine comprising: a predetermined number of times value changing means for changing the value of the predetermined number of times according to the type of the winning type.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) About the result at the time of winning obtained by predetermined lottery, a plurality of winning types are defined in advance.
(2) When a winning result is obtained in a predetermined lottery, it is determined which one of the plurality of winning types defined in (1) above is applicable.
(3) Then, the value of the predetermined number of times is changed according to the type of winning type (the type of winning symbol) determined in (2) above.

  In this way, in the present solution, since the value of the predetermined number of times is changed according to the type of winning type, the number of times until the latent notification can be randomly changed according to the type of winning type, A new game related to the notification method can be exhibited.

  Other solution means: The gaming machine of this solution means that in any one of the solution means, the predetermined number of times is the same as the upper limit number of lottery elements to be used for the predetermined lottery. Is a gaming machine characterized by

  In the present solution, the predetermined number of times is the same as the upper limit number of lottery elements stored for use in a predetermined lottery. Here, there is a type of gaming machine having a function of storing a lottery element (holding). There is an upper limit to the number of memories (for example, up to four per symbol), and the number of memories does not increase beyond the upper limit. For example, when the upper limit number of storage is 4, the predetermined number of times is “4 times”, and when the upper limit number of storage is 8 by two symbols, the predetermined number of times is “8 times”. In addition, even when the upper limit number of memories is 8 according to two symbols, if the upper limit number of memories in the non-time shortening state in which the electric chew support function does not work is substantially 4, predetermined The number of times can be “4 times”.

  In this way, in a gaming machine having a function of storing lottery elements, lottery elements may be stored to the maximum during or before the execution of the special game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the stored lottery elements are consumed in order. In this case, if the game ball launching is stopped at the end of the big hit game and then a new lottery element is not stored, the design will change by the lottery element stored to the maximum, and thereafter The design is not changed.

  In this solution, the predetermined number of times is the same as the upper limit number of lottery elements stored, so that it is possible to determine the internal state without firing any game balls after the end of the special game. In a normal state, it is possible to protect the player's profit by suppressing the player who wants to end the game from firing a useless ball.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem of sinking by clarifying when to stop.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (non-time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table (special area) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop symbol selection table at the time of the 1st special symbol big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (non-time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state) at the time of big hit with a ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table (special area) at the time of big hit with a ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern selection table (non-time reduction state) at the time of big hit without a ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state) at the time of big hit without a ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state) at the time of big hit without a ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table (special area) at the time of big hit without a ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern selection table at the time of a small hit (non-time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the small variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the small variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table (special area) at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of change pattern determination processing at the time of big hit with a ball. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of big hit without a ball. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special variation management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a latent variation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a latent specification lamp setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a latent variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow in the non-time reduction state developed in a pachinko machine. It is a figure explaining the game flow in the time reduction state developed in a pachinko machine. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning) at the time of corresponding to "14 round normal symbol 1". It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of a re-lottery effect partially. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect performed during a big hit game when “14 round normal symbol 1” or the like corresponds to a non-time shortened state. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a treasure challenge production partially (1/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of a production of a treasure challenge production partially (2/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a treasure challenge production partially (3/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a treasure challenge production partially (4/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a treasure challenge production partially (5/5). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect executed during a jackpot game when “16 round probability variation 1” is met in a non-time shortened state. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production of the mode shift production performed when it corresponds to "2 round big hit" etc. in the non-time shortening state (1/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the mode transition effect performed when it corresponds to "2 round jackpot" etc. in a non-time shortening state (2/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the mode transition effect performed when it corresponds to "2 round big hits" etc. in a non-time shortening state (3/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the mode transition effect performed when it corresponds to "2 round jackpot" etc. in a non-time shortening state (4/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in fireworks rush (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in fireworks rush (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in fireworks rush (4/4). FIG. 15 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect performed during a big hit game in the case of “16 round probability variation 2”. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a production of coast mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of shifting to a latent probability change state (1/3). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production at the time of shifting to a latent probability change state (2/3). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production at the time of shifting to a latent probability change state (3/3). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a mode production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the background image selection process for non-time reduction states. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a variable winning apparatus operation | movement pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process at the time of the 1st special symbol winning. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process at the time of the 2nd special symbol winning.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or during the change of the symbol, the display of the big hit, or the like During the big hit game, some kind of effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.) can be generated.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left side portion of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (non-time shortened state), and the right side portion of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state (big hit game state, small hit game state, This is a second game area (right-handed area) used in a winning game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, or the like. Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning port 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning ports 22, 24, a variable start winning device 28, a variable winning device 30 and the like are distributed and installed around the effect unit 40. Yes.

  Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20, the variable winning apparatus 30 and the variable start winning apparatus 28 are arranged in this order from the top to the right side of the game area 8a. Is arranged in. Further, the three left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the one right normal winning hole 24 is arranged in the right part of the game area 8a.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, or variable start at the time of operation. For example, the player enters the winning device 28 or the variable winning device 30 during the opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the start gate 20, enter the normal winning opening 24, enter the variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, or operate. There is a possibility of entering the variable start winning device 28 at the time.

  The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the game balls that have entered the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30 are It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (the board surface), when a game ball is to enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed) It is necessary to drive a game ball into the area (so-called “left-handed” is executed).

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to enter the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the normal winning port 24, the game ball is driven into the right side region (right hit region) in the game region 8a (so-called “right” It is necessary to execute "strike".

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, a right start winning port (no reference sign) is provided. Makes it possible to enter the ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one open / close member 28b, and this open / close member 28b reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3, one open / close member 28b is in the closed position (closed position) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the right start winning opening (game) (There is no gap where the ball can enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the right opening winning opening is opened by expanding the opening width on the right side. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can enter, and can enter the right start winning opening (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port) during the opening operation, but the balls are generated randomly.

  The above variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning), and allows a player to enter a big winning opening (no reference sign). (Special electric equipment, special winning event generation means).

  The variable winning device 30 is a device disposed above the variable start winning device 28, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the left-right direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, one opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed position) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the big winning opening (there is no space for a game ball to enter). It has become. On the other hand, when the variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is widened to the right to open the large winning opening. During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which it is possible to enter a game ball, and it is possible to generate a winning entry to the big winning opening (variable winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable prize device 30 (large prize opening at the time of opening) The game ball does not necessarily enter the variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, but the ball is generated randomly.

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The production unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inside thereof. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a spade-shaped ornament). The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed downstream thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40k. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, the game area 8a including the game balls that have entered the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning port), and the variable winning device 30 (large winning port) are included. All the game balls that have been driven into are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LED). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is a display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of storing that a game ball has entered the middle start winning port 26 every time a game ball flows into the middle start winning port 26. Each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball, the display mode is decreased by one each time. The second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port. It changes to the display mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one every time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a short time state display lamp 38e, a launch position designation lamp 38f, and a latent designation lamp 38g (advantageous state display means). A plurality of LEDs respectively corresponding to are included. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above. The main controller 70 controls the progress of the game by controlling at least the low probability non-time shortened state (normal state) and the high probability non-time shortened state (advantageous state).

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 is provided with a middle start winning port switch 80, a right start winning port switch 82, and a count switch 84 corresponding to the middle start winning port 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30, respectively. ing. The start winning port switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port). Further, the count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening) and counting the number thereof. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a prize opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of game balls into the normal prize openings 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 22 located on the left side of the board, and in the right prize port switch 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, a winning detection signal from the gate switch 78, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 is transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87 and the panel relay terminal plate 87 due to the configuration of the game board unit 8. Are provided with wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to open and close (activate) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core not shown. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. In addition, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8a as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal thereof. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 50 and 52, the various lamps include a board lamp 53 for decoration and performance installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like. Here, an example is given in which the glass frame decoration lamps 50 and 52 are connected to the glass frame decoration board 136. May be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132 through a tray electric decoration board.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is a sound generator incorporating a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), for example, and this acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the glass frame speakers 54 and 55 and the outer frame speaker 56. Sound output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame lighting board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 pass through the glass frame lighting board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Entered. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control command generation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination production command, a production command when the number of working memories increases) to be transmitted to the production control device 124. , A production command when the number of operating memories decreases, a remaining count counter command, a special gaming state designation command, a power supply restoration designation command, a firing position designation command, and the like. The generated command is port-output to the effect control device 124 in a process (effect control output process: step S123) described later. In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Here, the power-return designation command is a command (for example, 8100H) representing a state in which the gaming machine is powered on and restored. Further, the model designation command is a command (for example, 9xzzH (a value representing a gaming state based on backup information is input to zz)) indicating the model information of the gaming machine. If there are multiple types of gaming machines that have been diverted while maintaining almost the same, but with different jackpot lottery probabilities, etc., model information on which type of gaming machine is being used (For example, max type: 90zz, middle type: 91zz, sweet digital type: 92zz). The launch position designation command is a command that represents the launch position of a game ball that is advantageous to the player (for example, C0lrH (lr is input when 00 is left-handed and 01 when right-handed)).

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control command generation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting. For example, a RAM clear notification command (power-on factor designation command), a model designation command, and the like are generated. The generated command is port-output to the effect control device 124 in a process (effect control output process: step S123) described later.

  Step S115a: The main control CPU 72 executes a number designation command management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for managing a command related to the count cut counter. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for generating a time reduction number designation command, a special number designation command, and an ST number designation command.

  Here, the time reduction number designation command is a command representing the number of times of special symbol change display performed until the time reduction state is completed (for example, 86jjH (a corresponding numerical value or 0 is input to jj)). ). The special number designation command is a command representing the number of times of special symbol variation display performed until the selection processing of the special variation pattern selection table is completed (for example, C3kkH (a corresponding numerical value is input to kk). )). The ST number designation command is a command that represents the number of times of special symbol change display that is performed until the state in which the lottery probability relating to the special symbol is high (for example, 87ssH (ss is a numerical value corresponding to 127 or 127). (7FH) is input)). Further, the command generated here is port-output to the effect control device 124 in a process (effect control output process: step S123) described later.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the big prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Is backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 9). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 9). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S123: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process (high probability state limit number information transmitting means, time shortening state limit number information transmitting means). In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port. Specifically, it is checked whether there is a command set in a predetermined buffer (ring buffer) of the RAM 76, and if there is a command in the buffer, the command to be output is output to the port.

  Step S124: The main control CPU 72 clears the predetermined buffer (port output request buffer) when the command is output to the effect control device 124 in the previous process (step S123).

  Step S125, Step S126: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 9). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 6).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, an input state (ON / OFF) of a passing detection signal from the gate switch 78 and a winning detection signal from the middle starting winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86. Lead.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. (2) The variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls is issued. Output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, latent state) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer. The external information signal stored in the port output request buffer is transmitted to the data display device and the hall computer via the external terminal board 160.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer to the port.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S211 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 9). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening of the variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 9).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the upper limit (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. Are stored as a set (storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 11), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 11 and step S46 in FIG. 12) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 12). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of small hit, similarly to the above-described process at the time of loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition effect determination process after executing the determination result management process of step S82, and the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol of the caller. The process returns to the storage update process (FIG. 12). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 12). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and it is determined from the result whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable variation (normal) symbol” or “probability variation symbol”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “non-probable change (normal) symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thereby, in this embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (low probability state → high probability state, high probability state → low probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a bonus game variable winning device. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, if a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit of two rounds, a big hit of 14 rounds, or a big hit of 16 rounds, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to a big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs To do. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big win time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the big win variable winning device management process, the big winning opening solenoid 90 is set for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds, 0.1 seconds or until ten game balls are counted), For example, the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In the meantime, by allowing the variable winning device 30 to win the game balls intensively, the player is given an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game execution means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of the big win is referred to as “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these may be collectively referred to as “16 rounds”. In this embodiment, not only 16 round big hits but also 14 round big hits and 2 round big hits are provided as types of big hits. The winning type (winning symbol) may be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big win variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Each time the operation is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S123 in FIG. 7). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means, high probability non-time shortening state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (advantageous state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them. For example, in the case of “2 round probability variation 1a” or “2 round probability variation 1b”, it is assumed that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to the high probability non-time shortened state after the end of the big hit game.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but hardly enters the big winning opening.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, the following are prepared as a plurality of winning types.

The 14 rounds are big hits:
(1) “14 rounds are usually one big hit”
(2) "14 rounds are usually big hit 2"
(3) “14 rounds are usually 3 big hits”
(4) "14 rounds probable big hit 1"
(5) “14 rounds probable big hit 2”
(6) “3 round hits per 14 rounds”
(7) "14 rounds probable big hit 4"
(8) "14 rounds probable big hit 5"

There are two types of 16 round hits.
(9) “16 rounds probable big hit 1”
(10) “16 rounds probable big hit 2”

The two rounds are the following six types.
(11) “Two rounds of normal big hit 1”
(12) “Two rounds of normal big hit 2”
(13) “Two rounds of normal big hit 3”
(14) “2 round probability variation big hit 1a”
(15) “2b probable big hit 1b”
(16) “2 rounds probable big hit 2”

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “14 round normal jackpot 1” corresponds to a jackpot of “14 round normal symbol 1”, and “14 round normal jackpot 2” corresponds to a jackpot of “14 round normal symbol 2”. The same correspondence is applied to other jackpots. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[14 rounds of normal symbols 1-3]
In the special symbol stop display processing described above, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game) Execution means). In this case, the grand prize opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the fourth round. From the 5th round to the final 14th round, the process ends in an extremely short opening time (high-speed opening). For this reason, the big hit game of “14 rounds of normal symbols 1 to 3” gives 4 rounds (prize balls) to the player. When a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. In this case, since the “probability change function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player, but since the “time reduction function” is activated, the privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is not It is given to the player. In addition, the difference of each symbol of "14 round normal symbols 1-3" is a point from which the number of time shortening given is different (10 times, 20 times, or 30 times).

[14 round probabilistic symbols 1-5]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game) Execution means). In this case, the grand prize opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the fourth round. From the 5th round to the final 14th round, the process ends in an extremely short opening time (high-speed opening). For this reason, the big hit game of “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5” gives the player four balls (prize balls) for the player. In this case, since the “probability changing function” and the “time shortening function” are activated, a privilege to shift to the “high probability time shortening state” is given to the player. In addition, the difference of each symbol of "14 round probability variation symbols 1-5" is a point in which the number of times given is different (10 times, 20 times, 30 times, or 10000 times). For this reason, in the case of winning in “14 round probability variation 1 to 3” where the number of time reductions is relatively small (10 to 30 times), even if the player is given a privilege to shift to “time reduction state” The “time shortening state” may end and shift to a “high probability non-time shortening state (so-called latent probability variation state)”.

[16 rounds probabilistic pattern 1]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the grand prize opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the fourth round. From the 5th round to the final 16th round, it ends in an extremely short opening time (high speed opening). For this reason, the big hit game of “16 round probability variation 1” gives the player 4 balls (prize balls) for the game. In this case, since the “probability changing function” and the “time shortening function” are activated, a privilege to shift to the “high probability time shortening state” is given to the player. In the case of “16 round probability variation 1”, since the number of time reductions given is 10,000, the “high probability time shortening state” is not practically terminated.

[16 round probability variation 2]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the grand prize opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 16th round. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 rounds probable variation 2” gives 16 rounds (prize balls) to the player. In this case, since the “probability changing function” and the “time shortening function” are activated, a privilege to shift to the “high probability time shortening state” is given to the player. In the case of “16 round probability variation 2”, since the number of time reductions given is 10,000, the “high probability time shortening state” is not substantially ended.

[2 rounds of normal symbols 1-3]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “2-round normal symbols 1 to 3” in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the short-term jackpot gaming state occurs. (Special game execution means). The two-round jackpot game ends in an extremely short time compared to the 14-round jackpot game and the 16-round jackpot game, and therefore, the winning in the big prize opening hardly occurs. Therefore, the “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3” jackpot game is completed within a short period of time without giving the player a substantial pitch (prize ball). When the winning type corresponds to “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, the “time reduction function” is activated but the “probability variation function” is not activated after the jackpot game is over. For this reason, “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3” have the significance of terminating the “high probability state”. In addition, the difference of each symbol of "2 round normal symbols 1-3" is a point from which the number of times when given is different (10 times, 20 times, or 30 times).

[2 round probability variation 1a, 1b, 2]
In the previous special symbol stop display process, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “2 round probability variation symbols 1a, 1b, 2”, there is an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to a short-term big hit gaming state. Generated (special game execution means). The two-round jackpot game ends in an extremely short time compared to the 14-round jackpot game and the 16-round jackpot game, and therefore, the winning in the big prize opening hardly occurs. Therefore, the big hit game of “2 round probability variation symbols 1a, 1b, 2” ends within a short period of time without giving the player a substantial pitch (prize ball). Instead, if the winning type corresponds to “2 Round Probability Symbols 1a, 1b, 2”, a bonus that allows the player to transition to the “high probability state” by operating the “probability variation function” after the jackpot game ends. Granted to a person. In addition, when the “two-round probability variation 1a, 1b” is applicable, the “time shortening function” is not activated, so the state shifts to the “high probability non-time shortening state (so-called latent probability variation state)”. In the case of “symbol 2”, since the “time shortening function” is operated together, a so-called sudden probability variation state is set, and the state shifts to the “high probability time shortening state”.

  In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above “14-round probability variation symbol 1-5”, “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2” or “2-round probability variation symbol 1a, 1b, 2” A privilege for shifting the state to the “high probability state” is given to the player. In the “high probability state”, an internal lottery is won, and the winning symbols at that time are “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”, “16 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2” or “2 round probability variation symbols 1a, 1b, 2”. ”, The“ high probability state ”continues (restarts) after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and corresponds to the above “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, the internal state is a low probability state ( Return to normal probability state. In addition, if the internal lottery is won in the low probability state and it falls under “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, the internal state is maintained in the low probability state even after the big hit game ends. .

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small winning game, a small winning game is performed separately from the big winning game, and the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game executing means). In other words, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the game in which the variable winning device 30 operates) in the low probability state or the high probability state. (In this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small hit game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly enters the big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S123 in FIG. 7). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the low probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. In other words, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 30 as in the case of “big hit”. In addition, the range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S123 in FIG. 7).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation occurs (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → About 3 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, battle reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (non-time reduction state) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in a low probability or high probability non-time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “7” and “8” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are lost after super reach. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach fluctuation pattern” basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach fluctuation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, the fluctuation pattern number “27” corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is lost after super reach, and the fluctuation pattern number “28” corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is lost after battle reach. On the other hand, since the variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “48” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect. The fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are set to a fluctuation time (for example, about 0.5 seconds) that is extremely shortened as the fluctuation time in the normal state in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in the high probability time reduction state. Has been.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (special section) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table used in the case of a non-winning special section in a high probability time shortened state or a low probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). The special section refers to the first special symbol variation section after the big hit game when the “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5” are met.

  Here, in order to realize the treasure challenge production to be described later, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the break in the special section of the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state is all the same variation pattern (the variation time is about 60 seconds, for example). This selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach special variation pattern 50).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “50” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach special variation pattern 50 is a special variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

[See Figure 15: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case of non-winning), but when the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes) or small hit (step S2402: Yes), The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, 16 types are roughly prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The 16 types of breakdown are “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, “14 round probability variation 1 to 5”, “16 round probability variation 1 and 2”, “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, “2 round probability variation 1” Symbols 1a, 1b, 2 ". Each of the 16 types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “14 round normal symbol 1”, “14 round normal symbol 1a”, “14 round normal symbol 1b”, “14 round normal symbol 1c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “12”, “6”, “2”, “1”, “ “1”, “1”, “7”, “50”, “4”, “10”, “5”, “1” correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”, “16 round probability variation symbols 1” and “2 round probability variations corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. Symbols 1a, 1b, 2 "are shown.

  At the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting “14 round normal symbol 1” is 12/100 (= 12%), and the rate of selecting “14 round normal symbol 2” is 100 minutes. Of 6 (= 6%). Further, the ratio of selecting “14 round normal symbol 3” is 2/100 (= 2%), and the ratio of selecting “14 round probability variable symbols 1 to 3” is 1/100 (= 1), respectively. %). Furthermore, the ratio of selecting “14 round probability variation 4” is 7/100 (= 7%), and the ratio of selecting “14 round probability variation 5” is 50/100 (= 50%), respectively. It is. Furthermore, the rate at which “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 4/100 (= 4%), and the rate at which “2 round probability variation 1a” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%). The ratio that “2 round probability variation 1b” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%), and the proportion that “2 round probability variation 2” is selected is 1/100 (= 1%). It is.

  The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol for the first special symbol as a whole is 80%. In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for “16 round probability variation 2” and “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3” are not set.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. In addition, the EVENT values “01H” to “10H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, and “14 round normal symbol 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H02H” Will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probable number of changes]
The fourth column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the value of the probability variation number (the maximum number of times that the internal lottery can be executed in a high probability state) given after the big hit game ends. Has been.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” is met, the probability variation number is not given (0 times is given). On the other hand, in the case of any of “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1” or “2 round probability variation symbols 1a, 1b, 2”, the probability variation number is given 10,000 times.

[Time reduction]
In the third column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (the maximum number of times that the internal lottery can be executed in a time shortened state) given after the end of the big hit game is shown. ing.

  In the present embodiment, when the “14-round normal symbol 1” or “14-round probability variable symbol 1” is met, the number of time reductions is given ten times. In the case of “14 round normal symbol 2” or “14 round probability variation 2”, the number of time reductions is given 20 times. Furthermore, in the case of “14 round normal symbol 3” or “14 round probability variation 3”, the number of time reductions is given 30 times. Furthermore, in the case of “14 round probability variation patterns 4 and 5”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1” or “2 round probability variation symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times. On the other hand, in the case of “2 round probability variation 1a” or “2 round probability variation 1b”, the number of time reductions is not given (0 times is given). In addition, regarding the provision of the number of time reductions, a different value may be set according to the winning probability of the special symbol. For example, in a situation where the winning probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state, when the “two-round probability variation symbol 1a” or “two-round probability variation symbol 1b” is met, the number of time reductions may be given 10,000 times.

[Number of special fluctuations]
In the second column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of special fluctuations executed after the big hit game ends (the limit number of times the special fluctuation can be executed after the big hit game ends) It is shown.

  In the present embodiment, the number of special fluctuations is set to 1 when corresponding to “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”. On the other hand, in the case of “16 round probability variation 1” or “2 round probability variation 1a, 1b, 2”, the special variation count is set to zero. Note that regarding the setting of the number of special fluctuations, a different value may be set according to the presence / absence of a time shortening state or the winning probability of a special symbol.

〔role〕
The right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the role of each winning symbol in the game progression.
“14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” have a role of executing a failure effect in a treasure challenge effect, which will be described later, and giving the number of time reductions 10 times, 20 times, and 30 times, respectively. In this case, when the time reduction state ends, the internal state shifts to a low probability non-time reduction state.

  “14-round probability variation symbols 1 to 3” have a role of executing a failure effect in a treasure challenge effect and giving the number of time reductions 10 times, 20 times, and 30 times, respectively. In this case, when the time reduction state ends, the internal state shifts to a high probability non-time reduction state.

“14 Round Probability Symbol 4” executes a failure production in the treasure challenge production, but has a role of not ending the time reduction state until the next big hit.
“14 rounds probabilistic symbol 5” has a role of executing a successful production in a treasure challenge production and not ending the time reduction state until the next big hit.

“16-round probability variation 1” has a role of directly passing through a fireworks rush that is in a state of high probability time reduction without executing a treasure challenge effect.
The “2 round probability variation symbols 1a, 1b” have a role of executing a mode transition effect and shifting to a high probability non-time shortening state (latency probability variation state).
“2 round probability variation 2” has a role of executing a mode transition effect and shifting to a high probability time shortening state.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big-hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each allocation value “76”, “16”, “3”, “1”. , “4” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “16 round probability variation 2”, “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3” and “2 round probability variation 2” corresponding to each distribution value are shown.

  At the jackpot corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of “16 round probability variation 2” is 76/100 (= 76%), and the proportion of “2 round normal symbol 1” is selected. It is 16/100 (= 16%). In addition, the ratio that “2 round normal symbol 2” is selected is 3/100 (= 3%), and the rate that “2 round normal symbol 3” is selected is 1/100 (= 1%). is there. Furthermore, the ratio at which “2 round probability variation 2” is selected is 4/100 (= 4%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol is 80% as a whole. In the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, “14 round normal symbol 1 to 3”, “14 round probability variable symbol 1 to 5”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “2 round probability variable symbol 1a, The distribution value for “1b” is not set.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. In addition, the EVENT values “0AH” to “10H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “16 round probability variation symbol 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as “B2H0AH”. Become.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probable number of changes]
The fourth column from the right of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the value of the probability variation number given after the big hit game ends.

  In the present embodiment, when it corresponds to either “16 round probability variation 2” or “2 round probability variation 2”, the probability variation is given 10,000 times. On the other hand, when it corresponds to “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, the probability variation number is not given (0 times is given).

[Time reduction]
The third column from the right of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of time reductions given after the big hit game ends.

In this embodiment, when the “16 round probability variation 2” and “2 round probability variation 2” are met, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.
On the other hand, in the case of “2-round normal symbol 1”, the number of time reductions is given 10 times. In addition, in the case of “2-round normal symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 20 times. Furthermore, in the case of “2-round normal symbol 3”, the number of time reductions is given 30 times. Note that regarding the provision of the number of time reductions, a different value may be set depending on the presence or absence of the time reduction state. For example, when winning in a non-time shortened state, the number of time reductions may be set to zero.

[Number of special fluctuations]
The second column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of special fluctuations executed after the big hit game is finished.

  In the present embodiment, the special variation count is set to 0 when “16 round normal symbol 2”, “2 round normal symbol 1 to 3”, or “2 round probability variable symbol 2” is met. Note that regarding the setting of the number of special fluctuations, a different value may be set according to the presence / absence of a time shortening state or the winning probability of a special symbol.

〔role〕
The right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the role of each winning symbol in the game progression.
“16 Round Probability Symbol 2” has a role of winning 16 rounds by winning the battle reach during the fireworks rush. In this case, the high probability time shortening state continues after the end of the big hit game.

  “Two-round normal symbols 1 to 3” have the role of defeating the battle reach production during the fireworks rush and performing two rounds of big hits, giving the number of time reductions 10 times, 20 times, and 30 times, respectively. In this case, when the time reduction state ends, the internal state shifts to a low probability non-time reduction state.

  “Two-round probabilistic symbol 2” has a role of defeating by battle reach production during the fireworks rush and performing a two-round jackpot, and giving the number of time reductions to 10,000 times. In this case, if the coast mode that appears to be in the low probability time shortening state continues for 30 fluctuations or more, the fireworks rush returns to the high probability time shortening state.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not in operation). The working memory for the second special symbol is more easily accumulated than the working memory for. In this case, if you increase the selection ratio of “16 round probability variation 2” for the second special symbol, it will be easier to fall under “16 round probability variation 2” than usual, so increase the player's profit accordingly. This is because there is an advantage of being able to.

[See Figure 15: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to 14 rounds of big hit, etc., for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of “reach effects” are defined, and in the case of 14 round big hits, any variation pattern is selected. Will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, battle reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

  In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are roughly divided into two types according to the type of jackpot (winning symbol). One is a variation pattern selected at the time of hitting with a hitting ball such as 14 round jackpot or 16 round jackpot, and the other is a variation pattern selected at a big hit without hitting such as a round two hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for big hits with exits]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (non-time shortening state) with a big hit when there is a ball.
This selection table is a table used for a big hit with a ball exit in a low probability or high probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “61” to “66” correspond to variation patterns that are hit after super-reach.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state) with a big hit with a ball.
This selection table is a table used when a big hit with a ball in a low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “81” to “84” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the battle reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers “85” and “86” are the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the super reach. It corresponds. The “battle reach” is a battle reach executed with a low probability or a high probability time shortened state.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state) with a big hit with a ball.
This selection table is a table to be used when a big hit with a ball in a high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Further, all the fluctuation pattern numbers “101” to “108” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the battle reach. When winning in the high probability time shortening state, a winning variation pattern may be set without executing the reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (special section) with exit ball.
This selection table is a table used when a special hit in the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state corresponds to a big hit with a departure (fluctuation pattern defining means).

  Here, the variation pattern at the time of big hit with a ball in the special section of the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state is all the same in order to realize the special winning effect in the treasure challenge production described later. A variation pattern (variation time is about 60 seconds, for example) is set, and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach per special variation pattern 170).

  Accordingly, the main control CPU 72 selects “170” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The special fluctuation pattern 170 per non-reach is a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for big hits without exiting]
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (non-time shortened state) with no hitting big hit.
This selection table is a table used at the time of big hit without a ball in a low probability or high probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “121” to “128” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “121” to “124” correspond to the variation patterns that are hit after the super reach production, and the variation pattern numbers “125” and “126” are the wins after the reach production (after the normal reach production). The variation pattern numbers “127” and “128” correspond to the variation patterns that are hit without the reach effect being executed. As described above, in this embodiment, the big hit with no ball is executed “after the super reach effect”, “after the reach effect”, or “after the non-reach effect”.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “122” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state) without a ball.
This selection table is a table used at the time of big hit without a ball in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “141” to “148” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “141” to “144” correspond to the variation patterns that are hit after the super reach effect, and the change pattern numbers “145” and “146” are the results after the reach effect (after the normal reach effect). The variation pattern numbers “147” and “148” correspond to the variation patterns that are hit without the reach effect being executed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “142” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state) when there is no exiting big hit.
This selection table is a table used for a big hit without a ball in a high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “161” to “168” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “161” to “168” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Further, all the fluctuation pattern numbers “161” to “168” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the battle reach.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “162” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (special section) when there is no exiting big hit.
This selection table is a table used when a special hit in the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state corresponds to a big hit without a ball (fluctuation pattern defining means).

  Here, in order to realize the treasure challenge production described later, the variation pattern at the time of big hit without a ball in the special section of the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state is all the same variation pattern (the variation time is, for example, 60 This selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach per special variation pattern 180).

  Accordingly, the main control CPU 72 selects “180” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. Note that the special fluctuation pattern 180 per non-reach is a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

[See Figure 15: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines that the type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”, “16 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2” or “2 rounds”. In the case of “probable variation symbols 1a, 1b, 2”, the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag (high probability state setting means). The main control CPU 72 operates the probability variation function as a gaming state flag when the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3”. The value of the flag is reset (low probability state setting means).

  Further, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”, “16 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2”, “2 round probability variation”. In the case of “symbol 2”, “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (Time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operating means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for small hits]
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a small hit hour variation pattern selection table (non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used for small hits in a low probability or high probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “191” to “198” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “191” to “194” correspond to variation patterns that are small hits after super reach production, and variation pattern numbers “195” and “196” are small after reach production (after normal reach production). The variation pattern numbers “197” and “198” correspond to variation patterns that are small hits without the reach effect being executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit is executed “after the super reach effect”, “after the reach effect”, or “after the non-reach effect”.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “192” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a small hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “201” to “208” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “201” to “208” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a small hit after the non-reach variation.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “202” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a small hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “211” to “218” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “211” to “218” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a small hit after the non-reach variation.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “212” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of a small hit hour variation pattern selection table (special section).
This selection table is a table used when hitting a small hit in a special section of a high probability time shortened state or a low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means).

  Here, the variation pattern at the time of a small hit in the special section of the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state is the same variation pattern (the variation time is about 60 seconds, for example) in order to realize a treasure challenge effect described later. This selection table has a table structure for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach small hit special variation pattern 220).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “220” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random value. The non-reach small hit special variation pattern 220 is a special variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

[See Figure 15: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figure 14: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. Then, while referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, and step S2410 in FIG. 15). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Change pattern determination process at the time of loss]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the above-described variation pattern determination process at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2600: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”. The “variation pattern selection counter value” is a counter value managed by the main control CPU 72 and is a variable referred to when executing special variation. The variation pattern selection counter value is set in a special variation setting process (FIG. 50) described later.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2606. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, that is, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 executes step S2602.

  Note that the case where the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” means that special variation is executed, and the case where the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” means that special variation is performed. It means not to run.

  Step S2602: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. The internal state can be confirmed by the probability variation function operation flag and the time shortening function operation flag (hereinafter the same).

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2608. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2604.

  Step S2604: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2610. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2612.

Step S2606: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining the variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table for special section deviation (FIG. 19).
Step S2608: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the deviation fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 18) for the high probability time shortening state.

Step S2610: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the off-time fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 17) for the low probability time shortening state.
Step S2612: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table at the time of non-time reduction state (FIG. 16).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 15).

[Big hit fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit hour variation pattern determination process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2700: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current win corresponds to a big hit with a ball. The winning type can be confirmed by the symbol number of the big hit stop. Note that the big hit with a ball means “14 round big hit” or “16 round big hit”, and the big hit without a ball means “two round big hit”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current win corresponds to the big hit with a ball (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2702. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current win corresponds to a big hit with a given ball (No), that is, when it is confirmed that a big hit without a ball is found, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2704.

  Step S2702: The main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of hitting with big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a variation pattern in the case of “14 round big hit” or “16 round big hit”. The specific contents of the reason will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S2704: The main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern determination process without big ball hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a variation pattern in the case of “two round big hit”. The specific contents of the reason will be described later with reference to another drawing.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 15).

[Fluctuation pattern determination process for big hits with exits]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-mentioned big hit hit variation pattern determination process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2710: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2716. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, that is, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 executes step S2712.

  Step S2712: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2718. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2714.

  Step S2714: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2720. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2722.

Step S2716: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table with special balls for big hits (FIG. 25).
Step S2718: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table with a big hit for a high probability time shortening state (FIG. 24).

Step S2720: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table with a big hit for a low probability time shortening state (FIG. 23).
Step S2720: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table with a hitting ball hit for non-time-reduced state (FIG. 22).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit hour variation pattern determination process (FIG. 35).

[Fluctuation pattern determination process for big hits without exiting]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned no-ball-hit big hit variation pattern determination process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2730: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2736. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, that is, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 executes step S2732.

  Step S2732: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2738. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2734.

  Step S2734: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2740. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2742.

Step S2736: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 29) without special ball for special section.
Step S2738: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table without big ball for big probability shortening state (FIG. 28).

Step S2740: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table without big ball hit for low probability time shortening state (FIG. 27).
Step S2742: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining the variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table without big ball for the non-time reduction state (FIG. 26).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit hour variation pattern determination process (FIG. 35).

[Fluctuation determination process for small hits]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small hit hour variation pattern determination process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2800: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2806. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, that is, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 executes step S2802.

  Step S2802: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2808. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2804.

  Step S2804: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2810. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2812.

Step S2806: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table for small hits for a special section (FIG. 33).
Step S2808: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for determining a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table for small hits for the high probability time shortening state (FIG. 32).

Step S2810: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the small hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 31) for the low probability time shortening state.
Step S2812: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the small hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 30) for the non-time reduction state.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 15).

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 15), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type. )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the current working memory number is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 15).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14), and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “big winning variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “two round jackpot”, a value corresponding to “2 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “14 rounds jackpot”, a value representing “14 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 rounds jackpot”, a value representing “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of big hit symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 15). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “2 round jackpot”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “2 rounds”. Further, when the type of jackpot symbol is “14 rounds jackpot”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “14 rounds”. Further, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 rounds jackpot”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply shifted (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the address of the variable winning prize management device processing at the small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation management processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for managing special fluctuations executed after the end of the big hit game. The contents of the special variation management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S4609: The main control CPU 72 executes a latent fluctuation management process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for managing the latent fluctuation (a process for counting the number of fluctuations in the high probability non-time reduction state) executed after the end of the big hit game. The contents of the latent fluctuation management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically ensure that the “high probability state” continues until the next winning is substantially obtained. It should be noted that various numerical values (for example, 10, 20, 30, 10000, etc.) are set in the number cut counter regarding the “time reduction state” depending on the winning symbol.

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

  Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value (high probability state limit number management means, time shortening state limit number management means).

  Step S4632: The main control CPU 72 executes the number designation command management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for managing a command related to the count cut counter. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for generating a time reduction number designation command, a special number designation command, and an ST number designation command.

  Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result in the process of step S4630 is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. It is the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag that is reset. However, if an indigestible value (for example, 10,000 times) is set as the probability variation count, the “high probability state” is set for the high probability state. Since the value of the count-down counter is substantially zero, it is the time reduction function operation flag that is practically reset. On the other hand, when a digestible value (for example, 9 times) is set for the number of probability changes, if the value of the count counter for the high probability state reaches a specified value (0) in the “high probability state”, the probability variation function The activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state or the high probability state ends after the special symbol stop display (low probability state transition means, non-time reduction state transition means). When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Special variation management processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special variation management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4660: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than “0”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (step S4660: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4662. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, that is, when the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (step S4660: No), the main control CPU 72 Returns to the special symbol stop display processing (FIG. 40).

Step S4662: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of decrementing (decrementing by 1) the variation pattern selection counter value. As a result, the special section in which the special fluctuation is executed is completed.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 40).

[Hidden fluctuation management process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described latent fluctuation management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4670: The main control CPU 72 loads the probability variation disclosure counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the probability variation disclosure counter value is larger than “0”. Note that the probability variation disclosure counter value is set by a latent variation setting process (FIG. 51) described later.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation disclosure counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S4672. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the probability variation disclosure counter value is not larger than “0”, that is, when the probability variation disclosure counter value is “0” (No), the main control CPU 72 displays a special symbol stop display. Return to the middle processing (FIG. 40).

  Step S4672: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of decrementing (subtracting 1) the probability change disclosure counter value.

  Step S4674: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation disclosure counter value is “0”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation disclosure counter value is “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S4676. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the probability variation disclosure counter value is “0” (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 40).

Step S4676: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the latent designation lamp lighting permission flag to ON. The latency designation lamp lighting permission flag is stored in the RAM 76, and when ON, it means that lighting of the latency designation lamp 38g is permitted, and when it is OFF, lighting of the latency designation lamp 38g is permitted. It means not.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 40).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S1240) and latent designation lamp setting processing (step S1250).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the variable winning device 30 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e. Output. Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( OFF).

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any one of the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation count status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “2 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “2 rounds (2R)”. If the value of the continuous operation count status designates “14 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “14 rounds (14R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing “16 rounds (16R)”.

  In the latent designation lamp setting process (step S1250), the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the latent designation lamp 38g according to the value of the latent designation lamp lighting permission flag. Details of the process will be described later.

[Hidden designation lamp setting process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described latent designation lamp setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S1252: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the latent designation lamp lighting permission flag is ON.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the latent designation lamp lighting permission flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1254 and Step S1256. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the latent designation lamp lighting permission flag is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the display output management process (FIG. 43).

  Step S1254: The main control CPU 72 executes a latent designation lamp lighting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the latent designation lamp 38g. As a result, the latent designation lamp 38g has a special symbol a predetermined number of times (four times or ten times) without obtaining a winning result in the special symbol lottery after the internal state shifts to the latent probability changing state (advantageous state) When the display is variably displayed, information indicating that the internal state is the latent probability changing state is displayed as information of the main controller 70 (advantageous state display means).

Step S1256: The main control CPU 72 executes a latent probability changing state information setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting the latent probability changing state information (external information) in the port output request buffer. As a result, if the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times (4 times or 10 times) without obtaining the winning result in the special symbol lottery after the internal state shifts to the latent probability changing state, the external device In contrast, latent probability changing state information (probability changing information, advantageous state information) indicating that the internal state is a latent probability changing state is transmitted (advantageous state information transmitting means). The set latent state information is transmitted to the data display device and the hall computer via the external terminal board 160 in the external information processing (step S208) of the interrupt management process (FIG. 9).
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the display output management processing (FIG. 43).

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The big hit time variable winning device management process is a big hit game process selection process (step S5100), a big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a big hit big winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a big hit time big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the big hit special prize opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit special prize opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit special prize opening / closing operation is performed. If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of big hit, the time of each opening, and the like. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). Note that the opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plural winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 14). In addition, the interval time between rounds is set to, for example, about 1.4 seconds to 2.5 seconds for any winning symbol. The number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is, for example, 10 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds). Not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 15). Specifically, if the large category “two round big hit” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to two. Further, if “14 round big hit” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 14 times. Furthermore, if “16 round big hit” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program ("1" for 2 times, "13" for 14 times, "15" for 16 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time for easily entering the big prize opening during one release (for example, launch control). 10 or more game balls are fired by the board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 second is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time hardly occurs (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to enter the big winning opening during one release. It is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big win time big opening / closing operation process and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process (FIG. 45).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a big winning prize opening / closing operation process for a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, whether or not the interval timer is counting down can be confirmed by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S5314 is already in operation.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 46) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this processing, the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Next, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Run repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 46).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is able to win the variable variable prize at the big hit. Return to the end address of the device management process (FIG. 45). Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In particular, when such an open pattern is not employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning prize closing closing process. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 45), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Execute. Then, after the execution of the jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit big winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (2 times, 14 times, or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable winning device 30 at the big-hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 45).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 15) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, about 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value (high probability state limit number management means). The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about nine times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 15) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 10,000 times, 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, etc.). (Time shortening state limit frequency management means). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5514a: The main control CPU 72 executes a special variation setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a variation pattern selection counter value based on the type of winning symbol. The contents of the special variation setting process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S5514b: The main control CPU 72 executes a latent fluctuation setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a probability variation disclosure counter value based on the type of winning symbol. The contents of the latent fluctuation setting process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S5515: The main control CPU 72 executes a number designation command management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for managing a command related to the count cut counter. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for generating a time reduction number designation command, a special number designation command, and an ST number designation command.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Special variation setting processing]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special variation setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current win corresponds to either “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation 1 to 5”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current win corresponds to either “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5” (step S5600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the step S5602 Execute. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the current win corresponds to either “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”, the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end processing (FIG. Return to 49).

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 sets “1” to the variation pattern selection counter value. Thereby, after the big hit game is over, the special variation is executed once. The set variation pattern selection counter value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once. Through such processing, the main control CPU 72 can make the selected variation pattern a normal variation or a special variation.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit end processing (FIG. 49).

[Hidden variation setting process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the latent fluctuation setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5610: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning is a winning in “2 round probability variation 1a”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning is winning with “2 round probability variation 1a” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5614. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning is the winning with “2 round probability variation 1a” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5612.

  Step S5612: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning is a winning in “2 round probability variation 1b”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning is winning with “2 round probability variation 1b” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5616. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning is a winning with “2 round probability variation 1b” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5618.

  Step S5614: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting “4” to the probability variation disclosure counter value. Note that the probability variation disclosure counter value is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol is stopped and displayed once. Thus, when the fourth deviation after the end of the big hit game is completed, the latent designation lamp 38g informs the player that the latent probability changing state is present.

  Step S5616: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting “10” to the probability variation disclosure counter value. Thus, when the tenth variation after the end of the big hit game is completed, the latent designation lamp 38g informs the player that the latent probability changing state is present.

  By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 determines the number of notifications of the latent probability variation state (predetermined depending on whether it corresponds to the “two round probability variation symbol 1a” or “two round probability variation symbol 1b”). (Number of times value changing means).

Step S5618: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the latent designation lamp lighting permission flag to OFF. As a result, the lighting of the latent designation lamp 38g is not permitted.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit end processing (FIG. 49).

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, details of the small winning time variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening of the big prize opening to, for example, two based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and during such an opening time, most of the balls that enter the big prize opening during one opening. It is a short time that does not occur (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 52). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning prize opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 53) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this processing, the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 52). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hitting big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 53).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 52). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big winning opening closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 53). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 52).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs a small winning game big opening / closing operation process in the small jump game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 52). Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 52). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends the present module and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 52).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol change pre-process.

  Step S6514: The main control CPU 72 executes a number designation command management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for managing a command related to the count cut counter. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for generating a time reduction number designation command, a special number designation command, and an ST number designation command. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

[Game flow in non-time reduction state]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining a game flow in a non-time shortened state developed in a pachinko machine.

  When a game is started with a pachinko machine, the game is started from [F0] normal mode in a state of [F0] non-time reduction. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state”. In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the “low probability non-time shortened state”, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is started by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26. Progress.

  [F1] In normal mode, when [F2] “2-round probability variation 1a, 1b” or “small hit” is met, a mode transition effect is executed together with a two-round big hit game or a small hit game, and [F3] festival mode Migrate to [F3] The festival mode is a low probability or high probability non-time shortened state. Specifically, if the [F3] festival mode falls under “2 round probability variation 1a, 1b”, it becomes a high probability non-time shortened state and falls under “small hit” [F3] festival. When the mode is changed, a low probability non-time shortened state is entered.

  [F3] In the festival mode, when the [F4] prescribed condition (for example, the condition that the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the low probability non-time shortened state) is satisfied, [F1] shift to the normal mode.

  [F1] In the normal mode or [F3] festival mode, if [F5] “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probable symbols 1 to 3” is met, [F6] 14 round jackpot game (challenge bonus) ) Is executed, and [F8] treasure challenge effect is executed, [F8] failure effect is executed, and [F9] coast mode is entered.

[F7] The treasure challenge effect is a probability change judge effect that is executed using the first variation after the end of the jackpot game.
[F9] Coast mode in this case is a high probability or low probability time shortening state in which the number of time reductions is set to 10, 20 or 30 times, and the result of winning is not obtained [F10] special symbol When the specified number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 30 times) changes, [F3] shifts to the festival mode.

  [F1] In the normal mode or [F3] festival mode, if [F11] “14 round probable variation 4” is met, [F6] 14 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, [F7] treasure challenge production [F12] Failure production is executed, and [F9] shifts to the coast mode.

  [F9] Coast mode in this case is a high probability time shortening state where the number of time reductions is set to 10000 times, so that the winning result cannot be obtained and [F13] the special symbol fluctuates the specified number of times (30 times). [F14] Move to the fireworks rush. [F14] The fireworks rush is in a high probability time shortening state, and the next big hit is stochastically guaranteed.

  [F1] In the normal mode or [F3] festival mode, [F15] When the 14th round probability variation pattern 5 is met, [F6] 14 rounds big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, [F7] treasure challenge production [F16] Successful performance is executed, and [F14] Fireworks rush is entered.

  [F1] In the normal mode or [F3] festival mode, if [F17] “16 round probability variation 1” is met, [F6] 16 round big hit game (special bonus) is executed and [F14] fireworks rush as it is Transition. In this case, [F7] treasure challenge effect is not executed.

  In [F1] normal mode or [F3] festival mode, when [F19] “2 round probability variation 2” is met, the mode transition effect is executed together with the 2 round big hit game, and the [F14] fireworks rush is entered as it is.

[Game flow with time reduced]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining a game flow in a time shortened state developed in a pachinko machine.

  The [G0] time shortening state is roughly divided into [G1] fireworks rush (high probability time shortening state) and [G2] coast mode (high probability or low probability time shortening state).

  [G1] Fireworks rush or [G2] Coast mode, [G3] If “16 rounds probable variation 2” is met, [G4] Battle reach production [G5] Victory effect is executed, [G6] 16 rounds big hit After the game (ultra fireworks bonus) is over, [G1] Fireworks Rush is entered.

On the other hand, in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, when [G7] “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “2 round probability variation 2”, [G4] in battle reach production [G8] The defeat effect is executed, and [G9] after the end of the two round jackpot game, [G2] shifts to the coast mode. In addition, when it corresponds to "2 rounds probable variation 2", when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in [G2] coast mode, it shifts to [G1] fireworks rush.
Note that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 executes a variable display effect using an effect symbol or the like.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 59 is a continuous diagram showing examples of effect images corresponding to the change display and stop display of special symbols. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
59 (A): For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (the state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. . These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example of (A) in FIG. 59, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “14 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the corresponding mode (for example, blue display color or red display color) or at the time of winning The fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a common mode (for example, only the green display color).

[Variable display production start]
59 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means, production execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is inactive and the probability fluctuation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
(C) in FIG. 59: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the number “8” is stopped at the left position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 59, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed in conjunction with that decreases. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 59, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 59 (D): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops changing thereafter. In this example, the effect design representing the number “3” is stopped at the right position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 59: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. (Direction execution means). That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 60 is a continuous diagram showing a flow of super reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning) in the case of “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach production, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation variation 1”. To 5 ”(for example, 7-segment LED“ self ”,“ yo ”,“ mouth ”,“ 巳 ”,“ F ”,“ E ”,“ L ”,“ Γ ”, etc.) (Reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 60, each production | presentation symbol is simplified and shown only as the number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 60 (A): For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
60 (B): Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 60: After the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change in the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 60 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 60 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is eventually stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Generation of reach condition]
In FIG. 60 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. In addition, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the expected degree of probability variation jackpot will be high (not the probability variation is confirmed). Can give players various tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 60, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for a while, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group, and a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of super reach production]
In FIG. 60 (G): Following the announcement effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 60 (H): When the super reach production is approaching the end of the game, the content that the character's image suddenly appears on the screen as if it has been split into a close-up, and the character emits some dialogue (or silent (This may be a content of smiling at the event). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As a reach production different from the above, for example, if “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased and the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end,“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”- There is also a development that “5 is a big hit with a design with a high probability of probability change”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect can be obtained in which the player has a sense of expectation that “the probability big hit is likely to be near”.

  (I) in FIG. 60: Then, the last medium effect symbol stops. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to either “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”, but the type of winning symbol is not disclosed, For example, by rendering an effect symbol representing “5” in the center of the screen to be stopped and displayed, this time, an effect is instructed to the player that it corresponds to either “normal big hit or probable big hit”. .

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 60 (J): For example, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, “whether it is a promising big hit or a normal (non-probable big hit)” can be made undisclosed to the player. .

  In the case of “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”, the winning type is not disclosed after the end of the big hit game, but in the case of “16 round probability variation variation 1”, The following production methods can be employed. In other words, when “16 round probability variation 1” is internally applied, an even number of effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and a “7” effect symbol is stopped and displayed due to another change (for example, a re-lottery effect). There is an effect of promoting to “probable change”, or in the stop display effect, even-numbered effect symbols are stopped and displayed and promoted to “probability” in the effect during the big hit game.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Re-lottery production]
FIG. 61 is a continuous view partially showing an example of the re-lottery effect.
In FIG. 61, (A): When three production symbols are arranged, it is determined that there is a big hit, but a re-lottery production that finally transmits the type of big hit may be executed. In the example shown in the drawing, character information of “re-lottery” is displayed on the upper part of the screen. Thus, the player can be given a sense of expectation that a re-lottery effect will be started from now on and may change from “5 effect symbol” to “7 effect symbol”.

  In FIG. 61, (B): The effect symbols that are arranged in three are displayed gradually smaller, and the effect that the effect symbols that are arranged in three are sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating.

  In FIG. 61C, the three effect symbols become so small that they cannot be visually recognized. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the player presses the press of the effect switch button 45. An effect is urged.

[Re-draw lotion failure production]
In FIG. 61, (D): When the re-lottery effect fails, that is, when it corresponds to 14 rounds big hit, the re-lottery failure effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. In this case, however, the number of the production symbol is not changed (it remains “5”).

  In FIG. 61, (E): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, blue display color) corresponding to 14 rounds big hit. Thereafter, a challenge bonus effect corresponding to 14 rounds of big hit is executed.

[Re-draw lottery success production]
In FIG. 61, (F): On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is successful, that is, when it corresponds to 16 rounds big hit, the re-lottery successful effect is executed. In this case, the effect that the movable body 40f falls is triggered by the pressing of the effect switching button 45.

  In FIG. 61 (G): A stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol (“7”-“7”-“7”). The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to 16 rounds of big hit. Thereafter, a special bonus effect corresponding to 16 rounds of big hit is executed.

[Director-in-chief production (Challenge bonus production)]
FIG. 62 partially shows an example of the big role effect executed during the big hit game in the case of corresponding to “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5” in the non-time shortened state. FIG. This big role production is executed, for example, when three production symbols other than “3, 7” are arranged in the normal mode.

[1 round]
In FIG. 62 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game “during the big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “5”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, the player can be continuously informed of the information “winning with one effect symbol”. In the lower area of the display screen, characters of “challenge bonus” are displayed, and images of a female character, a horse character, and the like are displayed around the screen.

[4 rounds]
In FIG. 62 (B): After this, the big hit game proceeds smoothly, and when it shifts to 4 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND4” is displayed on the screen, and it is unique to the big hit game. The effect image is displayed. Note that the actual big hit game continues up to 14 rounds, but the 5th round and thereafter will be opened at a high speed, so this 4th round will be the actual final round. In addition, the above-mentioned effect symbol (number “5”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 62 (C): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big end effect that transmits the content of the effect to be executed later is executed. In this example, the text information “Treasure Challenge Entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big end effect, the player can be motivated to try the treasure challenge effect.

[Examples of directing treasure challenge]
63 to 67 are continuous diagrams partially showing examples of effects of treasure challenge effects.
The treasure challenge effect is a probability change judgment effect that is executed using the first one change after the end of the big hit game when it corresponds to “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5”. . In the treasure challenge production, the horse character pulls the treasure, and if it can draw the treasure, it will enter the fireworks rush. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 63 (A): After the jackpot game is completed when “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 5” are met, "Challenge production" is started. The effect display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen ("changed"-"changed"-"changed"). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

[Game description production]
When the treasure challenge effect is started, a game explanation effect is first executed. In the example shown in the figure, a hermit character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “If you draw a treasure, fireworks rush!”.

  In FIG. 63, (B): When the game explanation effect ends, an item provision effect in which the female character provides an item is executed. Specifically, an effect in which a female character straddling a horse takes out an item (food) is executed.

  (C) in FIG. 63: Then, an effect that the horse character eats the food provided by the female character is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of item to be provided, the reliability of success or failure in the treasure challenge effect can be varied.

  (D) in FIG. 64: The screen is switched, the head of the horse character is displayed large, and the characters “Ready” are displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 64 (E): The characters “GO!” Are displayed at the top of the screen, and it is instructed that the effect-changing effect of the effect switching button 45 has started. In addition, a button image in which the effect switching button 45 is simplified is displayed in the lower left area of the display screen, and an effect that prompts the player to press the effect switching button 45 is performed. Around the button image, a time meter indicating the lapse of the button effective time is displayed so as to surround the button image, and here, one square corresponds to about 1 second. In the example shown in the figure, all the eight square time meters are displayed as colored images, so that the press of the effect switching button 45 is effective for about 8 seconds from now on. Each square of the time meter decreases by one square every time 1 second elapses.

  In FIG. 64, (F): It is assumed that the player has started striking the effect switching button 45 in response to an effect prompting the player to press the effect switching button 45. Then, the horse character begins to step on the foot in response to repeated hitting of the effect switching button 45, and the effect of gradually moving to the left is executed. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 6 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 6 seconds.

  In FIG. 65 (G): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the vicinity of the center. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are four squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about four seconds.

  In FIG. 65 (H): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the left end of the screen. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are two squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about two seconds.

  In FIG. 65 (I): When the repetitive striking effect of the effect switching button 45 has reached the final stage, a cut-in notice effect is displayed that is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the character image is split into a large image. . In the example shown in the figure, a female character is displayed in an area cut diagonally on the screen, and a scene in which the female character is praying with both hands together is displayed. At this time, since the time meter has one remaining cell, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about one second.

[At the time of winning 14 rounds probabilistic symbols 5]
In FIG. 66 (J): When the previous jackpot corresponds to “14 rounds probable variation 5”, a successful production in the treasure challenge production is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the treasure tied to the tip of the string pulled by the horse character pops out vigorously.

  In FIG. 66 (K): The character “Success” is displayed at the top of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “Fantastic!”. Such a successful effect corresponds to the case where the previous jackpot corresponds to “14 round probability variation 5”, and is executed when the button is pressed once within the button effective time. When winning with a predetermined random number lottery (for example, random lottery with 1/10 winning), when the button is pressed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times) within the button effective time, or the button effective time has elapsed It is executed when

[At the end of change]
In FIG. 66 (L): All the effect symbols are stopped and displayed because the first fluctuation (when not winning) has ended since the end of the big hit game (“1”-“2”-“3”) . Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  In addition, at this timing, an effect is taught that teaches the player the internal state to be transferred thereafter. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such an effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “high probability time shortened state” fireworks rush.

[14 rounds of normal symbols 1 to 3 or 14 rounds of probable variation 1 to 4 wins]
In FIG. 67 (M): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 4”, a failure effect in the treasure challenge effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which a string pulled by a horse character breaks in the middle.

  In FIG. 67 (N): The character “failure” is displayed in the upper part of the screen, and the effect that the character of the hermit emits the speech “sorry” is executed.

[At the end of change]
In FIG. 67 (O): All effect symbols are stopped and displayed due to the end of the first change (at the time of non-winning) since the end of the big hit game ("4"-"5"-"6") . Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  In addition, at this timing, an effect is taught that teaches the player the internal state to be transferred thereafter. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such an effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability or high probability time shortened state” coast mode.

[Director-in-chief production (special bonus production)]
FIG. 68 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect executed during a big hit game when the “16-round probability variation symbol 1” corresponds to the non-time shortened state. This big role production is executed when, for example, three production symbols “3” or “7” are arranged in the normal mode.

[1 round]
In FIG. 68 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, the big-game effect of the content corresponding to the progress of the game, “Big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the number “7”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In addition, characters “special bonus” are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and panda and dog characters are displayed in the center area of the display screen.

[4 rounds]
In FIG. 68 (B): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and shifts to 4 rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND4” is displayed on the screen, and it is specific to the special bonus effect. Panda and dog characters are displayed. Note that the actual big hit game continues up to 16 rounds, but the 5th and subsequent rounds are opened at high speed, so the 4th round is the actual final round. Further, the effect symbol (the number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
(C) in FIG. 68: At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush state with a high probability time reduction state as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of mode transition production]
FIG. 69 to FIG. 72 are continuous diagrams showing an example of the effect of the mode transition effect that is executed when the “two round big hit” or “small hit” is met in the non-time shortened state. The mode transition effect is a non-disclosure effect for making it difficult to understand the internal state. In the following description, description of items common to the above-described effect examples is omitted.

[Before starting variable display production]
In FIG. 69, (A): Three lines of effect symbols are displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect design is stopped and displayed with a combination of numbers “9”-“1”-“3”.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 69 (B): The variable display effect is started by the scroll variation of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

[Left effect symbol stop]
In FIG. 69 (C): the left effect design representing the number “1” stops at the left position of the screen.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 69 (D): The right effect design representing the number “5” stops at the right position of the screen.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 69 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. Normally, if a special symbol is stopped and displayed as an outlier symbol, a stop display effect is also performed in a similar manner in the effect symbol. However, here, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “2 round probability variation 1a, 1b” or “small hit”, and the special effect symbol with the animal character displayed large is stopped at the center of the screen. It is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to remind the player that there is a possibility that the player has shifted to the “hidden probability change (latent probability change state)” state in subsequent games, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation. In addition, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, yellow display color or orange display color) corresponding to “two round probability variation symbols 1a, 1b” or “small hit”.

  The above example is an example in which the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed without going through the reach effect, but when the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed through the reach effect (for example, super reach effect) This is a production example.

  (F) in FIG. 70: For example, the super reach production shown in FIG. 60 is in progress. Here, the reach state is generated with the effect symbol “5”.

  In FIG. 70 (G): The last medium effect symbol stops. In the example shown in the figure, since the effect symbol “6” is stopped as the medium effect symbol, it is possible to give the player an impression that “the player has not been selected”.

  In FIG. 70, (H): When it corresponds to “2-round probability variation 1a, 1b” or “small hit”, the mode transition suggestion effect is executed. In the example shown in the figure, an effect in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen is executed.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 70, (I): In synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol, the special effect symbol in which the animal character is displayed in a large size is superimposed on the effect symbol “6”. Thereby, it is possible to remind the player that there is a possibility that the player has shifted to the “hidden probability change (latent probability change state)” state in subsequent games, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation. In addition, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, yellow display color or orange display color) corresponding to “two round probability variation symbols 1a, 1b” or “small hit”.

[Mode transition effect (first mode transition effect)]
When the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the center position of the screen, the mode transition effect is executed. This mode transition effect is executed during the two-round big hit when the “two-round probability variation symbols 1a, 1b” are met, or during the small-hit game when the “small hit” is met.

(Door closing effect)
In FIG. 71 (J): When the mode transition effect is started corresponding to “2-round probability variation 1a, 1b” or “small hit”, doors (襖) appear from both sides of the display screen, and slack in the center. The door is closed. Such a door closing effect is performed for the purpose of attracting the player's eyes by temporarily covering the display screen so far.

(Door opening production)
In FIG. 71 (K): Next, the door that has been closed is quickly moved to the left and right of the display screen, and a door opening effect representing the operation of opening the door is performed. Such a door opening effect is performed, for example, in the sense that the player is interested in the result of the opening of the door.

[Mode transition (background change) production]
In FIG. 71 (L): When the door is opened, the background image changes to a mode representing “festival mode” together with, for example, character information “Festival mode entry!”. The background image of “Festival Mode” is a background image with motifs of images such as “Taiko”, “Lantern”, and “Uchiwa” to deeply impress the festival. By executing such a mode transition effect, it is possible to visually appeal to the player that the effect has shifted to a mode different from the normal mode, and the possibility of a “high probability state” And keep the motivation to continue the game until the next winning is achieved (toward the next winning).

  In addition, the festival mode effect is common regardless of whether the internal state is the low probability non-time shortened state (normal state) or the high probability non-time shortened state (advantageous state) during execution of the variable display effect or the stop display effect. This is a common effect that is executed as an effect of the aspect (common effect execution means).

[Direction during festival mode]
In FIG. 71 (M): After the mode transition effect, when the next variation of the special symbol is started, the variation display effect of the effect symbol is executed. The background image at this time is switched to the “festival mode” mode. As a result, the player is informed that the mode on production has shifted to the “festival mode” through the door opening / closing operation. In addition, the 4th symbol Z1 is also variably displayed when the variation by the first special symbol is started.

[Mode transition effect (second mode transition effect)]
The example of production so far is a mode transition example in the case of corresponding to “2 round probability variation symbols 1a, 1b” or “small hit”, but the mode transition example in the case of corresponding to “2 round probability variation symbols 2” It becomes the mode shown below. However, since the effect example of the effect symbol until the mode transition effect is started is the same effect as in FIGS. 69 and 68, it is executed after (E) in FIG. 69 or (I) in FIG. The mode transition effect will be described.

(Door closing effect)
In FIG. 72 (N): When the mode transition effect starts corresponding to “2 round probability variation 2”, doors (か ら) appear from both sides of the display screen, and the door closing effect closes in the center. Is called. Such a door closing effect is performed for the purpose of attracting the player's eyes by temporarily covering the display screen so far.

(Door opening production)
In FIG. 72 (O): Next, the door that has been closed moves quickly to the left and right of the display screen, and a door opening effect representing the operation of opening the door is performed. Such a door opening effect is performed, for example, in the sense that the player is interested in the result of the opening of the door.

[Mode transition (background change) production]
72 (P): When the door is opened, the background image of the firework rush corresponding to the “high probability time reduction state” is displayed on the full screen. In this example, a background image corresponding to fireworks rush is displayed, and character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed.

[Direction during fireworks rush]
72 (P): After the mode transition effect, when the next variation of the special symbol is started, the variation display effect of the effect symbol is executed. At this time, since it is the background image of “fireworks rush”, the current variation display effect is recognized by the player as a variation during “fireworks rush”.
In this way, when “2 round probability variation 2” is won, not only the high probability state but also the time shortened state (so-called abrupt probability variation), so in subsequent games , It becomes easy to obtain an internal lottery opportunity with the second special symbol.

[Examples of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 73 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is in a state with a high probability time reduction.
When the fireworks rush is a transition from the non-time shortened state, when a successful result is obtained in the treasure challenge production, the fireworks rush is transferred when the “two-round probability variation 2” is met. Also, if the transition from the time reduction state corresponds to “16-round probability variation 2”, it will transition to coast mode corresponding to “14-round probability variation 5” or “2 round probability variation 2” Shifts when the special symbol changes 30 times without winning results in the mode. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  73 (A): For example, by changing the display of the second special symbol, the changing display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of “fireworks rush”. In order to deeply impress the player with the fireworks motif, the background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  (B) in FIG. 73: Since the current variation (at the time of non-winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“3”-“1”-“7”). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 73: When the variation of the next second special symbol is started, the variation display effect using the effect symbol is started again. In addition, in the fireworks rush with a high probability time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated. Therefore, as long as the player continues to make a right stroke, the variation of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol Display is often performed.

FIG. 74 to FIG. 77 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed when winning in the fireworks rush.
The following production examples are production examples that are executed when the fireworks rush corresponds to a 16-round jackpot or a 2-round jackpot. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 74, (A): The effect symbol is displayed in a “fireworks rush” state. In addition, a fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, the fourth symbol Z2 is displayed. Is displayed fluctuating.

  In FIG. 74 (B): For example, an effect is produced in which a female character utters the line “Game! By executing such an effect, it is possible to give the player an impression that “something will begin in the future”. In addition, from this point of time, in order to display the effect of making the ally character and the enemy character play against each other on the screen, the effect display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen (“2”). -"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating").

  In FIG. 74 (C): For example, a panda character (enemy character) appears on the left side of the screen, a female character (friend character) appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. Production to be performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle reach effect will be started. It should be noted that a reach state has occurred in the effect symbol that is variably displayed at the upper left of the screen ("2"-"fluctuating"-"2").

  In FIG. 75 (D): After that, the battle reach production proceeds in detail. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which the panda character moves toward the female character. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

  In FIG. 75 (E): This time, the female character performs a deadly stance, and an effect in which a flame (aura) appears from the female character's body is performed. At this point, the expectation of the big hit can be changed by changing the color and size of the flame.

  (F) in FIG. 75: Then, an effect is performed in which the female character and the panda character confront each other and the female character arranges the posture.

[Attack production]
In FIG. 76 (G): Subsequently, an effect in which a shock wave is emitted from the palm of the female character is executed. If you can defeat the panda character in this state, you win.

[At the time of winning two rounds of big hit]
In FIG. 76 (H): If the change in the special symbol this time corresponds to a big hit of 2 rounds (“2 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “2 rounds probable variation 2”), the panda character uses a shield. The effect of rebounding the shock wave is performed.

  In FIG. 76, (I): A panda character is displayed in a large size and a female character is displayed in a small size together with the characters “defeated. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced ("2"-"3"-"2").

  In FIG. 76 (J): In this case, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, yellow display color) corresponding to the big hit of two rounds.

[Fireworks rush end production]
Then, at the bottom of the screen, the text information “Fireworks Rush Ends ...” is displayed, which informs the player that the fireworks rush is over. The two rounds of high-speed opening are executed during the fireworks rush end effect. After the end of the fireworks rush effect, the player enters the coast mode, which is a low probability or high probability time shortening state.

[When winning 16 rounds of big hit]
In FIG. 76 (K): On the other hand, if this special symbol variation corresponds to 16 rounds big hit (16 round symbol 2), a shock wave hits the panda character, causing an explosion and causing the panda character to The production is carried out in the distance.

  In FIG. 76 (L): When the female character is displayed large together with the characters “Victory!” And the panda character is displayed small, it is transmitted to the player that it is a big hit (winning). At the upper left corner of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced (“2”-“2”-“2”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped.

  In FIG. 76 (M): The effect symbols are returned to the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a changing state.

[Promotion opportunity promotion]
In FIG. 77 (N): When there are three production symbols, it is decided that a big hit is there, but it depends on the size of the profit (outgoing ball) obtained by the big hit game (determines the number of rounds) Promotion chance production is executed.
In the example shown in the drawing, the character information “promotion chance” is displayed on the upper part of the screen. As a result, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the promotion chance effect will be started from now, and the player may be promoted from “2 effect design” to “7 effect design”.

  In FIG. 77, (O): The three-staged effect symbols are displayed gradually smaller, and the three-lined effect symbols are rotated and sucked into the back side of the screen.

  In FIG. 77 (P): The three effect symbols become so small that they cannot be visually recognized. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the player presses the press of the effect switch button 45. An effect is urged.

[Promotion of successful promotion]
In FIG. 77, (Q): When it corresponds to “16-round probability variation 2”, the promotion chance success effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. The number of the production symbol is changed from “2” to “7”.

  In FIG. 77 (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to “16 round probability variation symbol 2”. Then, after that, an ultra fireworks bonus effect corresponding to 16 rounds of big hit (a big role effect) is executed. As for the second special symbol of this embodiment, since the jackpot with the ball is only “16 round probability variation 2”, the promotion success effect is always executed when there are three production symbols. If one special symbol lottery is performed, for example, “16 rounds probable variation 1” corresponds, the promotion symbol number is not changed (it remains “2”), and then 16 rounds are performed. In effect, a 4-round jackpot game is executed.

[Director-in-chief production (Ultra fireworks bonus production)]
FIG. 78 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect executed during a jackpot game in the case of “16 round probability variation 2”. This big role production is executed when, for example, three production symbols “7” are arranged during the fireworks rush.

[1 round]
In FIG. 78, (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the number “7”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In the lower left area of the display screen, characters of “Ultra Fireworks Bonus” are displayed, and in the center of the display screen, images related to lively fireworks and images of a plurality of animals are displayed.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 78 (B): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and moves to the final 16 rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. Further, the effect symbol (the number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 78 (C): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush state with a high probability time reduction state as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of coast mode production]
FIG. 79 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the coast mode effect. This coast mode is a low probability or high probability time shortening state.
When the coast mode is a transition from the non-time shortened state, the transition is made when a failure result is obtained in the treasure challenge production. Further, when the transition is from the time shortening state, the transition is made when it corresponds to “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “2 round probability variation 2”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  79 (A): For example, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, and thereby the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “coast mode” state. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with motifs of images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” in order to express the healing impression that is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 79 (B): Since the current change (during non-winning) has ended, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“1”-“1”-“5”). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 79: The next fluctuation is started. When the coast mode is in a low probability time shortening state, the winning result is not obtained, and when the special symbol fluctuates 10 times, 20 times or 30 times, the coast mode is ended and the mode is changed to the normal mode or the festival mode. Moreover, in the high probability time shortening state in which the number of time reductions is limited, when the special symbol fluctuates 10 times, 20 times or 30 times without obtaining the winning result, the game is finished and the mode is changed to the festival mode. In addition, when the number of time reductions is in a highly probable time shortening state where the number of time reductions is not substantially restricted (when the time reduction number is set to 10,000), if the special symbol changes 30 times without obtaining the winning result, The mode ends and the fireworks rush is entered.

FIGS. 80 to 82 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects when the latent probability changing state is entered.
In the following drawings, an example of an effect on the liquid crystal display screen, an example of display on the data display device D, and an example of display on the integrated display substrate 89 are shown. An operation unit including a history button and a call button is arranged on the left side of the data display device D, and the number of jackpots for today, the previous day, and the day before the previous day is displayed at the top of the screen, and the current day is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The number of games at the end of the jackpot (number of fluctuations) is displayed. The following effect example shows an effect example in the case of transitioning to the festival mode corresponding to “2 round probability variation 1a”.

[First change]
In FIG. 80, (A): The first deviation fluctuation has been executed since the transition to the festival mode. The number of games on the data display device D is one. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol display device 34 displays the first special symbol variably, and the effect symbol is scroll-displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, since the upper lamp blinks and the lower lamp is lit, it is displayed that there are three operation memories of the first special symbol. Correspondingly, the number of markers M1 displayed corresponding to the operation memory of the first special symbol is three.

  In FIG. 80, (B): The first deviation has ended since the transition to the festival mode. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol display device 34 stops displaying the first special symbol, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal screen (“7”-“2”-“5”). .

[Second fluctuation]
In FIG. 80, (C): The second fluctuation fluctuation has been executed since the transition to the festival mode. The number of games on the data display device D is two. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol display device 34 displays the first special symbol variably, and the effect symbol is scroll-displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, since the upper lamp is lit and the lower lamp is lit, it is displayed that there are two operation memories of the first special symbol. Correspondingly, the number of markers M1 corresponding to the operation memory of the first special symbol is two.

  (D) in FIG. 81: The second fluctuation fluctuation has ended since the transition to the festival mode. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol display device 34 stops displaying the first special symbol, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal screen (“9”-“7”-“1”). .

[The third change]
In FIG. 81 (E): the third time of fluctuation fluctuation has been executed since the transition to the festival mode. The number of games on the data display device D is three. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol display device 34 displays the first special symbol variably, and the effect symbol is scroll-displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, since the upper lamp is turned on and the lower lamp is turned off, it is displayed that there is one operation memory of the first special symbol. Correspondingly, the display number of the marker M1 corresponding to the operation memory of the first special symbol is one.

  In FIG. 81 (F): The third fluctuation fluctuation has been completed since the transition to the festival mode. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol display device 34 stops displaying the first special symbol, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal screen ("2"-"1"-"3"). .

[Fourth change]
In FIG. 82 (G): the fourth deviation change has been executed since the transition to the festival mode. The number of games on the data display device D is four. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol display device 34 displays the first special symbol variably, and the effect symbol is scroll-displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, since the upper lamp is turned off and the lower lamp is turned off, it is displayed that there is no operation memory of the first special symbol. Correspondingly, the number of displayed markers M1 corresponding to the operation memory of the first special symbol is zero.

  (H) in FIG. 82: The fourth fluctuation change has been completed since the transition to the festival mode. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol display device 34 stops displaying the first special symbol, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal screen ("6"-"2"-"9"). .

  Here, the latent designation lamp 38g is turned on when the fourth fluctuation is completed after the transition to the festival mode. In addition, character information “probably changing” is displayed below “32” indicating the number of today's big hits on the data display device D.

[5th change]
In FIG. 82 (I): It is assumed that a player has launched a game ball, and one game ball has entered the start winning opening 26. In response to this, the fifth outlier fluctuation has been executed since the transition to the festival mode. The number of games on the data display device D is five. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol display device 34 displays the first special symbol variably, and the effect symbol is scroll-displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, since the upper lamp is turned off and the lower lamp is turned off, it is displayed that there is no operation memory of the first special symbol. Correspondingly, the number of displayed markers M1 corresponding to the operation memory of the first special symbol is zero. In the example shown in the figure, the lighting of the latent designation lamp 38g and the display of the character information “probably changing” on the data display device D are continued.

  The example of production up to this point is an example of production when the transition is made to the festival mode corresponding to “2 round probability variation 1a”, but when the transition is made to the festival mode corresponding to “2 round probability variation symbol 1b” When the tenth deviation change has been completed since the transition to the festival mode, the latent designation lamp 38g is turned on, and the character information “probably changing” is displayed on the data display device D.

  On the other hand, in the case of transition to the festival mode corresponding to “small hit”, the latent designation lamp 38g does not light up no matter how many times the special symbol fluctuates, and the character information “probably changing” is displayed on the data display device D. Is not displayed.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach notice effect, memory number display effect, big-time effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a change pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a power recovery designation command, a time reduction number designation command, a special number designation command, an ST number designation command, a firing position designation command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbols based on the result of the internal lottery, or the effect contents when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed. Is controlled (production execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and an effect of erasing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 83).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is performed when the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning variable variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 14) or the small winning variable variable winning device management process (FIG. 14). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 (treasure challenge effect) during execution of the variable display effect using the effect design, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, The display control CPU 146 is instructed to control the content of the effect (button effect) according to the result.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to a loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 16 round big hits, the effect control CPU 126 selects the big round effect pattern of 16 rounds big hit as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To do. As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 83) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 83). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the stay mode. The specific processing contents will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 85), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. As a result, it is possible to confirm what type of jackpot variation pattern is the current variation.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded variation pattern is a special variation pattern.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation pattern is a special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806, and when it is not possible to confirm that the current variation pattern is a special variation pattern (No). The effect control CPU 126 executes step S804.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the loaded variation pattern is a variation pattern after reaching.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern after reach (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806 and cannot confirm that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern after reach. In the case (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S808.

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process per special variation pattern. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is a big hit in the treasure challenge.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process after reaching. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, or a battle reach effect according to the type of change pattern (long or short change time).

Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 executes a non-reach per effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that suddenly hits without executing the reach effect. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning the effect symbol shown in FIG.
And after finishing the process of step S806, step S808, or step S810, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 86).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-described variation effect pattern selection processing at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. As a result, it is possible to confirm what type of outlier variation pattern the current variation is.

  Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the loaded variation pattern is a special variation pattern.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation pattern is a special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S826, and when it is not possible to confirm that the current variation pattern is a special variation pattern (No). The effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

  Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is a deviation fluctuation pattern after reaching.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation pattern is a shift variation pattern after reaching (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S828 and cannot confirm that the current variation pattern is a shift variation pattern after reaching. In the case (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S830.

  Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special variation pattern deviation effect selection process. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 executes a treasure challenge production while the special symbol is changing, and selects the production pattern to shift to the fireworks rush or to enter the coast mode based on the type of the last winning symbol. To do.

  Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes a shift effect selection process after reaching. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a reach effect and selects an effect pattern that is out of place. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation after reach based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 executes a non-reach off effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is shifted without executing the reach effect. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of non-reach based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.
Then, when the process of step S826, step S828, or step S830 ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 86).

[Mode production management process]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of the mode effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a time reduction state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the state designation command, and confirms whether or not the internal state is a time reduction state.

  As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the time reduction state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S860. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S854.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern. This confirmation can be executed by confirming the variation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S862. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether the previous winning symbol is “14 round probability variation symbol 5”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” or “2 round probability variation symbol 2”. Note that “2 round probability variation 2” is limited to winning in a non-time shortened state. To confirm which symbol the previous winning symbol corresponds to and which state was the previous internal state, information on the winning symbol and information on the internal state are stored in the RAM 130 at the time of the previous winning. Can be realized.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the previous winning symbol is any one of “14 round probability variation symbol 5”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” or “2 round probability variation symbol 2” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 Executes step S864. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the previous winning symbol is “14 round probability variation symbol 5”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” or “2 round probability variation symbol 2” (No), production The control CPU 126 executes step S858.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the number of changes of the special symbol after the big hit game is 31 or more. The confirmation of the number of times of change can be realized by counting the number of times of change of the special symbol after the big hit game is finished in the RAM 130.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of changes in the special symbol after the end of the big hit game is 31 or more (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S864. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the number of changes in the special symbol after the big hit game is 31 times or more (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S866.

  Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the non-time reduction state. Specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S862: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for treasure challenge. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a diamond image and a background image including character information “Treasure challenge” shown in FIG.

  Step S864: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for fireworks rush. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the background image shown in FIG.

  Step S866: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the coast mode. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image shown in FIG.

  And after finishing the process of step S860, step S862, step S864, or step S866, the production control CPU 126 returns to the production symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 86).

[Background image selection processing for non-time reduction state]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the non-time-reduced state background image selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S880: The effect control CPU 126 changes 30 times after the first mode transition effect (after winning the 2-round probability variation symbol 1a, 1b or after winning the small hit) or after the coast mode is finished (after the low probability time shortening state is finished). Check if it has passed. The number of changes can be determined by setting a change number counter after the big hit game is over.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that 30 fluctuations have elapsed after the first mode transition effect or after the coast mode ends (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S882. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that 30 fluctuations have elapsed after the first mode transition effect or the end of the coast mode (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S884. When the first mode transition effect has not been executed once or when the transition to the coast mode has not been performed once (for example, in the gaming state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 126 performs “ If YES, step S882 is executed.

  Step S882: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode background image selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image shown in (B) of FIG.

  Step S884: The effect control CPU 126 executes festival mode background image selection processing (common effect executing means). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image shown in (M) in FIG.

By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the “normal mode” background image or the “festival mode” background image according to the game situation even in the same non-time-reduced state. Can do. In the low probability non-time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 basically executes a process of selecting the “normal mode” background image, but after the first mode transition effect or after the coast mode, the “festival mode” is selected. Select a background image. When the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the low probability non-time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the “normal mode” background image, and the special symbol 30 in the high probability non-time shortened state. If it fluctuates more than once, the effect control CPU 126 continues the process of selecting the “festival mode” background image.
As described above, the effect control CPU 126 displays the background image of the “festival mode”, so that it can be undisclosed on the effect whether “two round big hit” or “small hit” is met.

  When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the mode effect management process (FIG. 89).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device operating process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S752), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754), variable winning device operating processing (step S756), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S758). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S752: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S754 to S758) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operating pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S756) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-process (step S758) as the next jump destination.

  Step S754: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the contents of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game.

  Step S756: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switch button 45 during execution of the big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the content of the effect (button effect) according to the result is monitored. The control information is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S758: In the post-operation of the variable prize apparatus, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transition destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable prize device.

  For example, in the case of winning with “14 round normal symbols 1 to 3” or “14 round probability variation 1 to 5”, the effect control CPU 126 produces an effect indicating that a treasure challenge is entered ((C) in FIG. 62). In the case of winning with “16 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” or “2 round probability variation symbol 2”, an effect indicating entry into the fireworks rush (FIG. 68) is executed. A process of selecting a medium (C) and other effects) is executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 126, in the case of winning with “2 round probability variation 1a, 1b” or “small hit”, an effect indicating that the festival mode is entered (the effect shown in (L) in FIG. 71). In the case of winning in “2 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, a process of selecting an effect indicating entering the coast mode is executed.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 85).

[Pre-processing of variable winning device operation]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the pre-operation of the variable prize winning device. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S900: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning is based on the “first special symbol”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the current winning is based on the “first special symbol”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning is based on the “first special symbol” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the current winning is based on the “first special symbol” (No), that is, if it is confirmed that the current winning is based on the “second special symbol”, The control CPU 126 executes step S904.

Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 executes a first special symbol winning process. Note that the details of the specific control will be described later using still another flowchart.
Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 executes a second special symbol winning process. Note that the details of the specific control will be described later using still another flowchart.
When the above processing is completed, the production control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 91).

[Process when winning the first special symbol]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special symbol winning process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 1”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 1”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16-round probability variation 1” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 1” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “2-round probability variation symbol 1a, 1b” or “small hit”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the winning symbol corresponds to “2 round probability variation symbol 1a, 1b” or “small hit”. To do.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “2-round probability variation symbol 1a, 1b” or “small hit” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S918. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “2-round probability variation 1a, 1b” or “small hit” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S914.

  Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “2 round probability variation symbol 2”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the winning symbol corresponds to “2 round probability variation symbol 2”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “2 round probability variation symbol 2” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S920. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “2-round probability variation symbol 2” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S922.

  Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special bonus effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (A) and (B) of FIG.

  Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes a first mode transition effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting effects shown in (J) to (L) in FIG.

  Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a second mode transition effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting effects shown in (N) to (P) in FIG.

Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes a challenge bonus effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in FIG.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operation pre-processing (FIG. 92).

[Process when winning the second special symbol]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol winning process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S930: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 2”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 2”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation 2” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S932. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 2” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S934.

  Step S932: The effect control CPU 126 executes an ultra fireworks bonus effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in FIG.

Step S934: The effect control CPU 126 executes a firework rush end effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (J) in FIG.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operation pre-processing (FIG. 92).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, after the mode transition effect, the latent designation lamp 38g is used to display that the internal state is the latent probability changing state (high probability non-time shortening state, advantageous state) with a certain number of fluctuations. Therefore, it can be clearly communicated to the player that the internal state is the latent probability changing state. As a result, it is possible to clarify the time when the player quits and to prevent the occurrence of the entrapment problem of continuing the game without knowing whether the internal state is the normal state or the latent probability changing state. it can.

(2) In the present embodiment, it is displayed as information of the main controller 70 that the internal state is the latent probability changing state after a while after the transition to the latent probability changing state, not at the transition to the latent probability changing state. For this reason, it is unclear whether or not the state has shifted to the latent probability changing state for a while as compared with the method of displaying as the information of the main controller 70 that the internal state is the latent probability changing state at the time of transition to the latent probability changing state. The period can be generated using information displayed by the main controller 70, and new game play can be exhibited.

(3) According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to clearly grasp that the external device is in the latent probability changing state, the display indicating the latent probability changing state is executed by the data display device D or the hall computer. be able to. Thereby, even when the player confirms the data display device D, it is possible to clearly grasp the time of quitting, and to prevent the problem of stagnation from occurring.

(3) In the present embodiment, it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the latent control state is changed as information displayed by the main controller 70. However, if the main controller 70 displays immediately after the special game is over that the latent probability is changed, the player cannot be given a sense of tension, and the fun is halved. In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the internal state shifts to the latent probability changing state and the special symbol lottery results in the special symbol lottery and the special symbol is displayed variably 4 or 10 times, the internal state In the initial stage, while maintaining the player's tension, ensuring the continuity of the game, whether or not the internal state is the latent probability change state. Can be clearly displayed, and the player can be given effective judgment material regarding whether or not the game can be continued.

(4) According to the present embodiment, since the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, and the latent designation lamp 38g are mounted on one integrated display substrate 89, these display devices are provided. It can be compact and can contribute to space saving. In addition, as a player, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 are display devices that are familiar to the user. The visibility and ease of confirmation of the lamp 38g can be improved.

(5) According to this embodiment, since the festival mode effect (common effect) in a common mode is executed regardless of whether the internal state is the normal state or the latent probability changing state, the player can perform the festival mode effect. During execution, the game is played without knowing the internal state. During execution of the festival mode effect, the fact that the internal state is the latent probability changing state may be displayed as information of the main controller 70 using the latent designation lamp 38g. For this reason, even if a state in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is a latent probability variation state in the production continues, it may be clearly displayed as information on the main control device 70 that the internal state is in an advantageous state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the sinking problem while clarifying when the player quits.

(6) According to the present embodiment, during execution of the festival mode effect, game state information indicating that the internal state is the latent probability changing state may be transmitted to the external device. For this reason, even if it is difficult to determine whether or not it is a latent probability changing state in the production, the external device (data display device D or hall computer) clearly displays that the internal state is the latent probability changing state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the sinking problem while clarifying when the player quits.

(7) According to the present embodiment, the number of latent announcements (four times) is the same as the upper limit number (four) of storage of the first special symbol. In some cases, it is possible to determine the internal state without launching any game balls after the execution of a), and a player who wants to end the game in a low-probability state may launch a useless ball. It is possible to protect the player's profit by suppressing the game.

(8) In this embodiment, the number of times until the latent announcement is 4 when winning the “2 round probability variation symbol 1a”, and the number of times until the latent announcement is 10 when winning the “2 round probability variation symbol 1b”. Therefore, the number of times until the latent notification is changed can be changed randomly according to the winning symbol, and new game playability regarding the notification method of the latent probability changing state can be exhibited.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a high probability non-time shortened state (a so-called latent probability variation state without electric support) is displayed on the lamp of the main controller 70 has been described. However, a high probability time is displayed on the lamp of the main controller 70. A shortened state (a so-called latent probability changing state with electric support) may be displayed.

  In the embodiment described above, the number of latent announcements (predetermined number) has been described with two examples of “4 times” and “10 times”, but may be one type or three or more types. . The number of latent announcements is not limited to “4 times” and “10 times”, and an arbitrary number can be set.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which “2 round normal big hit” is not set for the first special symbol has been described. However, “2 round normal big hit” is set for the first special symbol, and “two round normal big hit” is set in the normal mode. ", The mode transition effect may be executed in the same manner as" 2 round probability variation big hits 1a, 1b ".

  In the above-described embodiment, the high-probability non-time shortening state has been described as an example in which the transition is made immediately after the end of the jackpot game. You may employ | adopt the game nature which transfers to a high probability non-time shortening state after progress. In this case, the latent designation lamp 38g can be turned on after a predetermined number of deviation fluctuations after shifting to the high probability non-time shortening state.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (6)

In a gaming machine having, as an internal state, a normal state to which normal conditions are applied for a game and an advantageous state to which advantageous conditions are applied compared to the normal state,
A main controller for controlling the progress of the game by controlling at least the normal state and the advantageous state;
When a lottery opportunity occurs during the game, lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery in the main control device;
When the predetermined lottery is executed, the symbol display means for displaying the symbols in a manner corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the symbols are variably displayed as information of the main controller over a predetermined fluctuation time. When,
If the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times without obtaining a winning result in the predetermined lottery after the internal state shifts to the advantageous state, the internal state is displayed as information on the main controller. A gaming machine comprising: advantageous state display means for displaying the advantageous state. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
When the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times without obtaining a winning result in the predetermined lottery after the internal state has shifted to the advantageous state, the internal state is in the advantageous state with respect to an external device. A gaming machine comprising advantageous state information transmitting means for transmitting advantageous state information indicating a state. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
Special game execution means for executing a special game when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the symbol display means;
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, after the special game is over, a transition is made to a high probability state in which a winning is obtained with a higher probability than a low probability state in which a winning is obtained with at least a predetermined probability with respect to the predetermined lottery. And at least a predetermined frequency to shift to the non-time reduction state without shifting to a time reduction state in which the lottery opportunity can be generated at a higher frequency than the non-time reduction state in which the lottery opportunity occurs. And a high probability non-time shortening state transition means for shifting to a high probability non-time shortening state,
Said advantageous state is:
A gaming machine characterized by being in the high probability non-time shortening state. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
A gaming machine comprising an integrated display board on which at least the symbol display means and the advantageous state display means are mounted. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
After performing the variable display effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol, the symbol effect execution means for executing the stop display effect corresponding to the stop display of the symbol;
A common effect executing means for executing a common effect in a common mode even when the internal state is the normal state or the advantageous state during the execution of the variable display effect or the stop display effect;
The advantageous state display means includes:
When the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times without obtaining a winning result in the predetermined lottery after the internal state shifts to the advantageous state during execution of the common effect, the internal state Is displayed as information of the main control device that is in the advantageous state,
The advantageous state information transmitting means includes:
If the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times without obtaining a winning result in the predetermined lottery after the internal state shifts to the advantageous state during execution of the common effect, the external device The gaming machine is characterized by transmitting advantageous state information indicating that the internal state is the advantageous state. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
About the result at the time of winning obtained by the predetermined lottery, a winning type defining means for prescribing a plurality of winning types;
A winning type determining means for determining which of a plurality of winning types defined by the winning type defining means when a winning result is obtained in the predetermined lottery;
A gaming machine comprising: a predetermined number of times value changing means for changing the value of the predetermined number of times according to the type of the winning type determined by the winning type determining means.